IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

266
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00 IDU Hardware Description Issue 02 Date 2010-03-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Transcript of IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Page 1: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemV100R005C00

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 02

Date 2010-03-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 3: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 5: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 620 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 V100R002C00

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer

l Installation and commissioning engineer

l Field maintenance engineer

l Data configuration engineer

l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 620

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the second release of the V100R005C00 version.

Compared with the first release, the updated contents are as follows:

Update Description

5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable The wire color of the auxiliary interface cableis added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 7: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction to the Product......................................................................................................1-11.1 Positioning.......................................................................................................................................................1-21.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-22.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis.....................................................................................................................2-22.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Board Configuration........................................................................................................................................3-33.3 IF1A/IF1B.......................................................................................................................................................3-6

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-73.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-73.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-83.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-123.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-153.3.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-153.3.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-17

3.4 IFX................................................................................................................................................................3-183.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-193.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-193.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-213.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-243.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-273.4.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-273.4.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-29

3.5 IF0A/IF0B.....................................................................................................................................................3-303.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-313.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-313.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-32

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Contents

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-343.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-373.5.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-373.5.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-39

3.6 IFH2..............................................................................................................................................................3-403.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-403.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-403.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-423.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-463.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-493.6.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-503.6.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-53

3.7 SL4................................................................................................................................................................3-553.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-553.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-553.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-573.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-603.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-623.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-623.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-623.7.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-63

3.8 SL1/SD1........................................................................................................................................................3-643.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-643.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-643.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-663.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-683.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-703.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-713.8.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-713.8.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-72

3.9 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-733.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-733.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-733.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-753.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-773.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-793.9.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-793.9.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-80

3.10 PL3..............................................................................................................................................................3-813.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-813.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-813.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-82

ContentsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 9: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-843.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-853.10.6 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-863.10.7 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-86

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................................................................................................................3-873.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-873.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-883.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-883.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-903.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-953.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-963.11.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-963.11.8 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-97

3.12 EFT4............................................................................................................................................................3-973.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-983.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-983.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-993.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1013.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1033.12.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1043.12.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-106

3.13 EMS6.........................................................................................................................................................3-1073.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1073.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1083.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1113.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1133.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1173.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1183.13.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1183.13.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-122

3.14 EFP6..........................................................................................................................................................3-1243.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1243.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1243.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1273.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1293.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1323.14.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1333.14.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-136

3.15 PXC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1373.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1383.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1383.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-139

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Contents

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1413.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1433.15.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1433.15.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-144

3.16 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1453.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1453.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1463.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1473.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1483.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card................................................................................................................3-1553.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1583.16.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1583.16.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-160

3.17 Fan Tray Assembly...................................................................................................................................3-1613.17.1 Composition.....................................................................................................................................3-1623.17.2 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1623.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1623.17.4 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1623.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1633.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-164

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-14.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-44.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-64.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-7

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-35.2 Protection Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable................................................................................................................5-45.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel..........................................................................................5-4

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-65.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-75.6 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................5-105.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................5-145.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable......................................................................................................................5-15

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable.....................................................................5-175.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable..............................................................................................................................5-185.9 External Alarm Transit Cable.......................................................................................................................5-215.10 Serial Port Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-23

ContentsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 11: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

5.11 Orderwire Line............................................................................................................................................5-245.12 Network Cable.............................................................................................................................................5-25

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1

C Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................ C-1

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Contents

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 13: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figures

Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620..................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620............................................... 1-3Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products......... 1-3Figure 1-4 IDU 620..............................................................................................................................................1-5Figure 1-5 Direct mounting .................................................................................................................................1-7Figure 1-6 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-3Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels..........................................................................................................2-5Figure 3-1 Board appearance................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Board bar code....................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration........................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle..........................................................................3-9Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel...............................................................................................................................3-12Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel................................................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-15Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle...................................................................................3-21Figure 3-9 IFX front panel.................................................................................................................................3-25Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-27Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle......................................................................3-32Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel.............................................................................................................................3-35Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel..............................................................................................................................3-35Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620..........................................................................................3-37Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave..........................3-42Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle...............................................................................3-43Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-46Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view.............................................................................................................................3-47Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620...................................................................................................3-49Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle.................................................................................3-58Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-60Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-62Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle.........................................................................3-66Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-68

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Figures

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-68Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620.............................................................................................3-70Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle........................................................................3-75Figure 3-28 SLE front panel...............................................................................................................................3-77Figure 3-29 SDE front panel..............................................................................................................................3-77Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-79Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle.................................................................................3-82Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-84Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-85Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle................................................................3-88Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-91Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)........................................................................3-92Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).......................................................................3-93Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)............................................................................3-94Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620....................................................................................3-96Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle.............................................................................3-100Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel...........................................................................................................................3-101Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-102Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-103Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle............................................................................3-111Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel..........................................................................................................................3-113Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-115Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620................................................................................................3-117Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6............................................................................................3-128Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6................................................................................................................3-129Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-131Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-132Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC............................................................................................................3-139Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture....................................................................................................3-140Figure 3-56 PXC front panel............................................................................................................................3-141Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620..................................................................................................3-143Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC............................................................................................................3-147Figure 3-59 SCC front panel............................................................................................................................3-149Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-151Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface........................................................................3-152Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces......................................................3-153Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface...............................................................................3-153Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card....................................................................................3-156Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620....................................................................................................3-158Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame...............................................3-159

FiguresOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 15: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition....................................................................................................3-162Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board....................................................................................................3-163Figure 3-69 FAN front panel............................................................................................................................3-164Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620...............................................................................3-165Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 PDU front panel..................................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle....................................................................................4-6Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode...............................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode.................................................................................4-8Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable.....................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel.....................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper........................................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)................................................................................5-10Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)............................................................................5-11Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable.......................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable............................................................................................5-14Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable...........................................................................................5-16Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable...................................5-18Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable........................................................................................5-19Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable....................................................................................5-21Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable......................................................................................................5-24Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire.......................................................................................................5-24Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable.........................................................................................................5-26

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Figures

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 17: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Tables

Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620........................................................................................................1-4Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620.............................................................................1-5Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620..........................................................................1-6Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620..............................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B......................................................3-9Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B...................................................3-11Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................3-13Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description........................................................................................................3-14Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B.........................................................................................3-15Table 3-7 Radio work modes..............................................................................................................................3-15Table 3-8 IF performance...................................................................................................................................3-17Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...................................................................3-18Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B...........................................................................3-18Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX..............................................................3-22Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX............................................................3-24Table 3-13 IFX indicator description.................................................................................................................3-25Table 3-14 IFX interface description..................................................................................................................3-26Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX..................................................................................................3-27Table 3-16 Radio work mode.............................................................................................................................3-27Table 3-17 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-29Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-30Table 3-19 XPIC performance...........................................................................................................................3-30Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX.......................................................................................3-30Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B..................................................3-33Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B.................................................3-34Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description......................................................................................................3-35Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description......................................................................................................3-36Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B.......................................................................................3-37Table 3-26 Radio work modes............................................................................................................................3-38Table 3-27 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-39Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-39Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B...........................................................................3-40

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Tables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

Page 18: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2............................................................3-43Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2..........................................................3-45Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description............................................................................................................... 3-46Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description................................................................................................................3-47Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..............................................................3-48Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode......................................................... 3-48Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description........................................................................................3-49Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2................................................................................................ 3-50Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames........................................................... 3-50Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-53Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-54Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..............................................................................3-54Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2.....................................................................................3-55Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4..............................................................3-58Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4............................................................3-60Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-61Table 3-46 SL4 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-61Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4......................................................................................................... 3-62Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-63Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4...............................................................3-64Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1..................................................... 3-67Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1....................................................3-68Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description.........................................................................................................3-69Table 3-53 SL1 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-70Table 3-54 SD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-70Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1..........................................................................................3-71Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1.................................................................................................3-71Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-72Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1.......................................................3-73Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE.................................................... 3-75Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE...................................................3-76Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description........................................................................................................3-78Table 3-62 SLE interface description.................................................................................................................3-78Table 3-63 SDE interface description................................................................................................................ 3-78Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE.........................................................................................3-79Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance.......................................................................................... 3-80Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE......................................................3-80Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3..............................................................3-82Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3............................................................3-83Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-84Table 3-70 PL3 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-85Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3..................................................................................................3-85

TablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 19: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance............................................................................................................3-86Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3...............................................................3-86Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1...............................................................................3-87Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................3-89Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1...........................................3-89Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description................................................................................................3-91Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-91Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-92Table 3-80 PH1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-92Table 3-81 PD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-92Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1).........................................................................3-93Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).........................................................................3-93Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).................................................................3-94Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)..............................................................................3-94Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.................................................................................3-96Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1.........................................................................................3-96Table 3-88 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-97Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1......................................................3-97Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.....................................................3-98Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4.........................................................3-100Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4.......................................................3-101Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description.............................................................................................................3-102Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description.............................................................................................................3-102Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces.........................................................................................3-103Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description.................................................................................................3-103Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4..............................................................................................3-104Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance.....................................................................................3-106Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4..........................................................3-107Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B...............................................3-108Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6......................................................3-112Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6....................................................3-112Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description..........................................................................................................3-113Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description..........................................................................................................3-115Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-116Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-116Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-117Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6...........................................................................................3-118Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6..................................................................................................3-118Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance................................................................................................3-122Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..........................................................................3-123Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-123Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6.......................................................3-124

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Tables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

Page 20: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6.......................................................3-128Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6......................................................3-129Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6.........................................................................................3-130Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6....................................................................................3-131Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-131Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-132Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-132Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D.......................................................................................................3-133Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-137Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6.........................................................3-137Table 3-124 PXC indicator description............................................................................................................3-141Table 3-125 PXC interface description............................................................................................................3-142Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC.............................................................................................3-143Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance..........................................................................3-144Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance.......................................................................................3-144Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC..........................................................3-145Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions.................................................................................3-146Table 3-131 SCC indicator description............................................................................................................3-149Table 3-132 SCC interface description............................................................................................................3-150Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-151Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface.......................................................................3-152Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description.........................................................................................3-152Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface.............................................................3-153Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers.......................................................................................................................3-156Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-160Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-160Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-161Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC..........................................................3-161Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA........................................................................3-162Table 3-143 FAN indicator description............................................................................................................3-164Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3Table 4-3 PDU interface description....................................................................................................................4-5Table 5-1 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-3 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable).................................................................................5-12Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)...............................................................................5-12Table 5-5 120-ohm E1 cable connections..........................................................................................................5-13Table 5-6 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl....................................................................................5-15Table 5-7 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections.................................................................................................5-16Table 5-8 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)..........................................................................................5-19Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)..........................................................................................5-20

TablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 21: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)........................................................................................5-21Table 5-11 External alarm transit cable connections..........................................................................................5-22Table 5-12 Serial port cable connections........................................................................................................... 5-24Table 5-13 Orderwire wire connections.............................................................................................................5-25Table 5-14 Pin assignments of the MDI.............................................................................................................5-25Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI-X.........................................................................................................5-26Table 5-16 Cable connection of the straight through cable................................................................................5-27Table 5-17 Cable connection of the crossover cable..........................................................................................5-27Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................A-1Table A-2 IFX indicator description....................................................................................................................A-2Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description........................................................................................................A-4Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description..................................................................................................................A-5Table A-5 SL4 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-6Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description...........................................................................................................A-6Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description..........................................................................................................A-7Table A-8 PL3 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-8Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description..................................................................................................A-8Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description...............................................................................................................A-9Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description..............................................................................................................A-9Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6...........................................................................................A-11Table A-13 PXC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-12Table A-14 SCC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-13Table A-15 FAN indicator description..............................................................................................................A-14Table A-16 Weight of Boards............................................................................................................................A-14

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description Tables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

Page 22: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 23: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

1 Introduction to the Product

About This Chapter

This chapter provides basic information on the OptiX RTN 620 and the IDU 620 in terms ofproduct application and equipment type.

1.1 PositioningThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can providea seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or privatenetworks.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODUis connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 24: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

1.1 PositioningThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can providea seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or privatenetworks.

The OptiX RTN 620 provides several types of service interfaces, and features flexibleconfiguration and easy installation. In addition, the OptiX RTN 620 can provide a TDMmicrowave and Hybrid microwave integrated solution according to the network requirements,and supports the hybrid networking of microwave and optical fibers.

l TDM radio transmission solutionIn the TDM radio transmission solution, the OptiX RTN 620 transmits TDM services atthe E1, E3, and STM-1 levels, and Ethernet services in the manner of Ethernet over SDHor Ethernet over PDH.

Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

E1

E1

FE

STM-1/E1

E1 FE

E1

FE

E1

E1

BSC

RNC

FE/GE

STM-1/E1

RegionalBackhaulNetwork

OptiX RTN 620 BTS NodeB BSC RNCMSTP

l Hybrid radio transmission solution

The OptiX RTN 620 supports an upgrade from the TDM radio transmission solution to theHybrid radio transmission solution, and can transmit the Native E1 service and NativeEthernet service.

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 25: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

Regional BackhaulNetwork

OptiX RTN 620 BTSNodeB BSCRNC

FEE1

FEE1

E1

E1FE

FE/GE

E1

GE

E1

E1

STM-1/E1

FE

l Radio and optical fiber hybrid networking solution

The OptiX RTN 620 can be networked with other OptiX transmission products. Thus, itcan provide an optical transmission and radio transmission seamlessly integrated solutionto transmit SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services.

Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiXtransmission products

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

STM-1ring

STM-4ring

MSTPOptiX RTN 620

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 26: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODUis connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

IDU 620

The IDU 620 is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It accesses services, performsmultiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control andcommunication function.

Table 1-1 provides the brief introduction to the IDU 620 .

Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620

Item Performance

Chassis height 2U

Pluggable Supported

Service interfaces E1, E3, STM-1o, STM-1e, STM-4, FE, GE

Ethernet processingcapability

l Supports the VLAN and QinQ.

l Supports the transparent transmission, supports EPL,EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN.

l Supports QoS (including CAR, CoS, and shaping)functions, traffic classification based on VLAN ID, IEEE802.1p, and DSCP, eight priority queues, and SP + WRRqueue scheduling.

l Supports Ethernet OAM based on IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

l Supports the LAG.

l Supports the LPT.

l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)protection.

l Supports the Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH.

l Supports synchronous Ethernet.

Number of microwavedirections

1 to 4

RF configuration mode l 1+0 non-protection configuration

l N+0 non-protection configuration (N≤4)

l 1+1 protection configuration

l N+1 protection configuration (N = 2 or N = 3)

l XPIC configuration

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 27: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

The Hybrid microwave and the PDH microwave do not support the N+1 protection configuration and theXPIC configuration.

Figure 1-4 IDU 620

ODU

The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It performs frequency conversion andamplification of signals.

The OptiX RTN 620 provide a complete ODU solution, and support an entire frequency bandfrom 6 GHz to 38 GHz. OptiX RTN 620 supports the RTN 600 ODUand RTN XMC ODU. TheOptiX RTN 620 supports three series ODU: standard power, high power, and low capacity forPDH to meet the requirements of different scenarios.

NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHzfrequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

ODU type SP and SPA HP LP and LPA

Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz (SPODU)6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38 GHz(HP ODU)10/10.5 GHz (HPODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23GHz (LP ODU)7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/32/38 GHz (LPAODU)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

Page 28: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

Microwavemodulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM(SP ODU)QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM (SPAODU)

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620

Item Description

High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDHODU

ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1

Frequency band 7/8/15/23 GHz 7/8/15/23 GHz

Microwave modulationmode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separatemounting.

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 620 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarizedantenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.

l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, theODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for oneantenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) mustbe mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-5 shows the direct mounting.

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 29: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 1-5 Direct mounting

l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or a large-

diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-6 shows the separate mounting.In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted to enable two ODUs to share one feedboom.

Figure 1-6 Separate mounting

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

Page 30: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 31: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU 620 is a 2U chassis with four layers and houses pluggable boards.

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 32: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

The and Figure 2-1 show the chassis structures of the IDU 620 respectively.

Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

The IIDU 620 can be installed as follows:

l In a 300 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In an open cabinet

l On a wall

l On a desk

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

The three groups of installation holes are used for the following three installation modes:

l Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinet

l Installing the IDU chassis in an open rackWhen you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the open rackor the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 33: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Installing the IDU chassis on the wall

l Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor wall-mouting

Installation holesfor the cabinet

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

Label DescriptionTable 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. The actual labelsmay be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Indication

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48- -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

Productnameplate label

The product name and certification

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 34: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Label Label Name Indication

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Certificate ofqualificationlabel

The equipment is qualified.

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

Board layoutlabel

The boards that can be installed ineach slot

ESD

ESD protectionlabel

The equipment is sensitive to staticelectricity.

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Laser safetyclass label

The power class of the laser source

Grounding labelon the chassisbody

The grounding position in thechassis body

Grounding labelon the mountingear

The grounding position in themounting ear

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

! Periodiccleaning label

The air filter should be cleanedperiodically.

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

Fan warninglabel

The fan blades should not betouched when the fan is rotating.

Hightemperaturewarning label

The board surface temperature mayexceed 70°C when the ambienttemperature is higher than 55°C. Inthis case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touchingthe board.

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

! Operationwarning label

The ODU-PWR switch must beturned off before the IF cable isremoved.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 35: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Label Label Name Indication

PULL

Operationguidance label

The switch lever must be pulledoutwards slightly before setting theswitch to the "I" or "O" position.NOTE

There may be no operation guidancelabel on the equipment that weredelivered previously.

Label Position

Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards by using the IDU620 as an example. The actual positions of the labels may be different depending on theconfigurations of the chassis and boards.

Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48- -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

!

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

ESD

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

PULL

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 36: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 37: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 620 support the following types of boards: IF board, SDH board, PDH board, Ethernetboard, integrated power cross-connect clock board, system control and communication board,and fan board.

The boards of each type are as follows:

l IF board: IF1A/IF1B, IFX, IF0A/IF0B, IFH2

l SDH board: SL4, SL1, SD1, SLE, SDE

l PDH board: PL3, PO1, PH1, PD1

l Ethernet board: EFT4, EMS6, EFP6

l Integrated power cross-connect clock board: PXC

l System control and communication board: SCC

l Fan board: FAN

3.1 Board AppearanceThe board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight).

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types ofboards.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.

3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board.

3.7 SL4

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 38: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.14 EFP6The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board.

3.15 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.16 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.17 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 39: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.1 Board AppearanceThe board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight).

Figure 3-1 Board appearance

On the front panel of the board, there are two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejectorlevers are used to insert and remove the boards. The captive screws are used to fasten the board.The bar code of the board is attached to one of the two ejector levers.In the case of the EMS6board, a label indicating the MAC address is affixed on one ejector lever of the board.

Figure 3-2 Board bar code

Bar code

Inner code

③④

Board versionBoard nameBoard feature code

0514721055000015-SL61SD101① ② ③ ④

NOTE

The board feature code of an optical interface board is used to indicate the type of the optical interface onthe board. The board feature code of an E1 interface board is used to indicate the impedance of the interfaceon the board. For a detailed description of the board feature code, refer to the description of each board inthe document.

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types ofboards.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 40: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration

FAN

Slot 20

EXT/IF Slot7

EXT/IF Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT/IF Slot8

EXT/IF Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTE

EXT refers to the extended slot for a service board. IF refers to the slot for an IF board.

Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

PXC Integrated power cross-connect clock board

Slot 1/3 Accesses one input of -48 V/-60V DC power.Provides a full timeslot cross-connection for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to16x16 VC-4.Supports the input and output ofone external clock signal.

SCC System control andcommunication board

Slot 2 Integrates an EOW subboard,occupying the logical slot 21.Provides the NM interface,external alarm interface,synchronous/asynchronous datainterface, and orderwireinterface.

IF1A SDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.The IF1A and IF1B boardssupport the TU-based and STM-1based microwave frame formatsfor establishing microwave linksbetween two sets of IDU 620.The IF0A and IF0B boardssupport the E1-based microwaveframe format for establishingmicrowave links with the IDU605 1D/2D.

IF1B

IF0A PDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8

IF0B

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 41: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

IFX XPIC intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.Provides the XPIC function.Provides the STM-1 basedmicrowave frame structure.

IFH2 Hybrid intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 l Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of theODU that is connected to theIF board is 10 plus the slotnumber of the IF board.

l Provides one FE/GE electricalinterface for accessingEthernet services.

l Supports the AM function.

SL4 SDH single-port STM-4board

Slot 6/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-4 opticalinterface.

SL1 SDH single-port STM-1board

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-1 opticalinterface.

SD1 SDH dual-port STM-1board

Uses the SFP optical module toprovide two STM-1 opticalinterfaces.

SLE SDH single-port STM-1electrical board

Provides one 75-ohm STM-1electrical interface.

SDE SDH dual-port STM-1electrical board

Provides two 75-ohm STM-1electrical interfaces.

PL3 3xE3/T3 tributary board Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides three 75-ohm E3/T3electrical interfaces.

PO1 8xE1 tributary board Provides eight 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PH1 16xE1 tributary board Provides 16 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PD1 32xE1 tributary board Provides 32 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 42: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

EFT4 4-port 10M/100MEthernet transparenttransmission processingboard

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides a 4x10/100BASE-T(X)interface for processing Ethernettransparent transmissionservices. The maximum uplinkbandwidth of the board is2xVC-4.

EMS6 4-port RJ-45 + 2-portSFP Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernetswitching processingboard

Provides four FE electricalinterfaces. The other two portsuse SFP optical/electricalmodules for providing two GEoptical/electrical interfaces. TheGE electrical interface iscompatible with the FE electricalinterface.Supports the transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services andLayer 2 switching services. Themaximum uplink bandwidth ofthe board is 2xVC-4.

EFP6 6-port RJ-45 FastEthernet EoPDHswitching processingboard

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides six FE electricalinterfaces.Provides the EoPDH processingfunction.Supports the transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services andLayer 2 switching services. Theuplink bandwidth of the board is63xE1.

FAN Fan board Slot 20 Provides wind cooling for theIDU 620.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the IF1A/IF1B.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 43: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.3.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.3.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The waysideservice attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply toboth PDH and SDH microwaves.

3.3.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processingperformance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

IF Processingl Maps PDH service signals and SDH service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

Page 44: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pointer Processingl Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the TU pointer in PDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports N+1 protection.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the IF1A/IF1B.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 45: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle

Backplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards

Channel switchingsignal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theautomatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

Page 46: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 47: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes,DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signaland sends it to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the TU pointer.

l Maps the TU-12s into the specified position in theVC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

Page 48: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel

IF1A

IF1A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 49: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel

IF1B

IF1B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

Page 50: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 51: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.3.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.3.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The waysideservice attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply toboth PDH and SDH microwaves.

Radio Work Mode

The IF board can operate in the following seven radio work modes.

Table 3-7 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

Page 52: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

E3 QPSK 28 (27.5)

E3 16QAM 14 (13.75)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service AttributesWhen the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported by radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input boardThis parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end. The following are theparameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 53: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l ATPC upper threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustment

This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold setting

This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.3.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processingperformance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance

Table 3-8 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

Page 54: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Item Performance

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding forSDH signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

IF1A IF1B

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 420 g 400 g

Power consumption < 12.2 W

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.4.1 Version Description

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 55: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

The functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODUand the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarizationinterference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of theIFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/IF1B.

3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.4.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1byte.

3.4.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODUand the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarizationinterference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

IF Processingl Maps VC-4 service signals into SDH microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes SDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates SDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

l Cancels the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal in the XPIC mode.

NOTE

When the XPIC function and the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) function are used, the transmissioncapacity doubles under the same channel conditions.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

Page 56: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads.

l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports N+1 protection.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 57: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of theIFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/IF1B.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle

PXC

IF IFprocessing

unit

Logicproces

singunit SCC

SCC

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

PowerunitClock unit Power

unit

SCC

1+1HSB/FD/SDPaired boards

Backplane

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal ODU control signal

Channel switchingsignal

XPIC signal

XPIC Pairedboards

SMODEMunit

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

Page 58: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal into two channels.– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and

transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.

l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from thepaired IFX and transmits the converted signal to theMODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IFsignal from the paired IFX as a reference signal.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 59: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

Page 60: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC board.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 61: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-9 IFX front panel

IFX

IFX

ODU-PWR

IF

LIN

K

AC

T

OD

UR

MT

STA

TSR

VXP

IC

XPIC

OUTIN

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-13 IFX indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-25

Page 62: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-14 IFX interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

XPIC IN XPIC input signal SMA XPIC cable

OUT XPIC output signal

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 63: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFX IFX

IFX IFX

Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.4.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1byte.

Radio Work ModeThe IFX supports only one radio work mode.

Table 3-16 Radio work mode

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-27

Page 64: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

l 27.5 MHz is the channel spacing of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service AttributesWhen the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported on radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input boardThis parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 65: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

XPIC AttributesThe XPIC enabled parameter can be set to enabled or disabled.

l When the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX splits the received IF signal, outputs one signalto the XPIC OUT port, and performs XPIC by using the reference IF signal from the XPICIN port.

l When the XPIC function is disabled, the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port must be loopedback by using an XPIC cable.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.4.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance

Table 3-17 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-29

Page 66: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

XPIC Performance

Table 3-19 XPIC performance

Item Description

Cross polarizationimprovement factor (XPIF)

19 dB

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 450 g

Power consumption < 14.5 W

3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 67: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.5.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.5.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

3.5.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

IF Processingl Multiplexes 2xE1/5xE1/10xE1/16xE1 service signals into PDH microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes PDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates PDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-31

Page 68: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle

Backplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards

Channel switchingsignal

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 69: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital modulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytesfrom the PDH microwave frame to form a 2M overheadsignal and sends it to the logic processing unit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the PDH microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC board.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-33

Page 70: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.5.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 71: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel

IF0A

IF0A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel

IF0B

IF0B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-35

Page 72: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 73: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.5.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

Radio Work Mode

The IF0A/IF0B can operate in the following four radio work modes.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-37

Page 74: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-26 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

2xE1 QPSK 3.5

5xE1 QPSK 7

10xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are the channel spacings of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

l The 2xE1 work mode does not support 1+1 protection.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 75: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3.5.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance

Table 3-27 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-39

Page 76: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 520 g

Power consumption < 13.7 W

3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmissionof E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distributionmode.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example todescribe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDHmicrowave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.6.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

3.6.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 77: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distributionmode.

IF Processingl Supports the Hybrid microwave frame and supports the pure transmission of the E1 or

Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of the E1 and Ethernet signals.

l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM).

l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Ethernet Service Processing

The front panel of the IFH2 has a GE electrical interface. The GE electrical interface supportsthe following port functions:

l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The workingmodes supported are 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length of 1966bytes.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

The GE electrical interface also supports the following Ethernet QoS functions:

l Supports the flow classification function that complies with IEEE 802.1p.

l Schedules the queues of four priority levels in the strict-priority (SP) mode.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

When the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured in the Hybrid microwave, the two IFH2 boards mustwork with one EMS6 board. As shown in Figure 3-15, the GE ports of the main and standby IFH2 boardsare connected to two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 boards through network cables. The two Ethernet portsof the EMS6 board must be configured as a Link Aggregation Group.

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-41

Page 78: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave

FAN

Slot 20

IFH2

IFH2

IDU 620

EMS6

Slot 6

Slot 4

Slot 2

Slot 8

PXC

PXC

Slot 5

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 7

To the externalequipment

SCC

Network cable

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports the PRBS bit error test at the IF port.

l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example todescribe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDHmicrowave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 79: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principleBackplane

PXC

IFIF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwave servicesignal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Pairedboard

Channel switching signal

Ethernet servicesignal

GE

Ethernetprocessing

unit

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-43

Page 80: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the hybrid microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code in the hybrid microwave frameand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the Link ID in the hybrid microwave frame andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message in the hybridmicrowave frame and the changes in the microwaveRDI, and reports the changes to the SCC through thecontrol bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM byte, andDCC bytes from the hybrid microwave frame to forma 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the hybrid microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4 and sends the VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.

l Sends the Ethernet service signal in the hybridmicrowave frame to the Ethernet processing unit.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Ethernet processingunit

Classifies Ethernet service packets into four queues thathave different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p.Schedules the services in strict-priority (SP) mode andsends the services through the Ethernet interface.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 81: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

Ethernet processingunit

l Performs Ethernet performance counting for theaccessed FE/GE signal.

l Classifies the packets into four queues that havedifferent priorities according to IEEE 802.1p andschedules the services in SP mode.

l Sends the Ethernet signals to the MUX/DEMUX unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, andmicrowave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-45

Page 82: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel

IFH

2

IFH

2

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

ODU-PWR

GE

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no power access.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms, or hasno power access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 83: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces

Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

GE GE electrical port RJ-45 Network cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

The GE port of the IFH2 supports the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front viewand pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-18 and refer to Table 3-34 and Table3-35.

Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-47

Page 84: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 85: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

The GE port has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-36.

Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFH2 IFH2

IFH2 IFH2

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-49

Page 86: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > Slot 7 > Slot 8 > Slot 6

3.6.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

Radio Work Mode

Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

7 QPSK 10 5

7 16QAM 20 10

7 32QAM 25 12

7 64QAM 32 15

7 128QAM 38 18

7 256QAM 44 21

14 (13.75) QPSK 20 10

14 (13.75) 16QAM 42 20

14 (13.75) 32QAM 51 24

14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 31

14 (13.75) 128QAM 78 37

14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 43

28 (27.5) QPSK 42 20

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 40

28 (27.5) 32QAM 105 50

28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 64

28 (27.5) 128QAM 158 75

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 87: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 75

56 QPSK 84 40

56 16QAM 168 75

56 32QAM 208 75

56 64QAM 265 75

56 128QAM 313 75

56 256QAM 363 75

40d 64QAM - 75

NOTE

l a: The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l b: The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l c: The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 servicecapacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can beused for the Ethernet services.

l d: This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.

Radio Link ID

The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC Attributes

ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable status

This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower threshold

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-51

Page 88: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

AM AttributesThe AM is a technology used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme based on the qualityof channels. The AM attributes include the following parameters:

l AM Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the board enables the AM function to perform adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable.

l IF Channel BandwidthThis parameter determines the channel spacing used in the case of adaptive modulation.This parameter can be set to 7 MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz.

l Modulation mode of the assurred AM capacityThis parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l Modulation mode of the full AM capacityThis parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l E1 capacityThis parameter specifies the number of E1s in the hybrid working mode. The number ofE1s must not exceed the maximum number of E1s when the committed-capacitymodulation scheme is used.

Ethernet ParametersThe parameters that you may frequently set for the GE port of the IFH2 are as follows:

l Basic attributes

l Flow control

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabled

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 89: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working mode

There are five working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex andauto-negotiation. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending onthe working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, referto the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

3.6.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance

Table 3-39 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-53

Page 90: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Item Performance

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding

Adaptivetimedomainequalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface PerformanceThe 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 91: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 580 g

Power consumption < 16.4 W

3.7 SL4The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.7.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

3.7.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

3.7.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL4 provides S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 optical interfaces.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-55

Page 92: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.

l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.

l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.

l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power andreceive optical power.

l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a linear MSP group.

l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the switching conditions for a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 93: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

For the details of SNCP, two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-57

Page 94: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-4

STM-4

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

STM-4 signal

Paired board

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-4 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-4 optical signals into electricalsignals.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 95: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

If a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is configured, the overhead processing unit sends the overhead byteto the paired SL4 to realize the overhead pass-through function.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-59

Page 96: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel

SL4 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATS

RV

LOS

TX RX

SL4

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 97: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicators

Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-46 SL4 interface description

Interface Description Type ofConnector

Cable

TX Transmit port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX Receive port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-61

Page 98: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL4

SL4

3.7.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 S-4.1 34060277

02 L-4.1 34060280

03 L-4.2 34060284

3.7.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 99: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.7.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-4 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 622080

Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

Fiber type Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2

Minimum receiver sensitivity(dBm)

-28 -28 -28

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-63

Page 100: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 290 g

Power consumption < 7.2 W

3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits2xSTM-1 optical signals.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SL1/SD1.

3.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

3.8.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.8.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

3.8.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

3.8.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits2xSTM-1 optical signals.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 101: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL1/SD1 provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.

l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.

l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.

l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.

l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power andreceive optical power.

l Supports the ALS function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer ProcessingProcesses AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a linear MSP group.l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-65

Page 102: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SL1/SD1.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principleBackplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-1

STM-1

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

STM-1 signal

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 103: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electricalsignals.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-67

Page 104: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes clock.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel

SL1 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATSR

VLO

S1

TX1 RX1

SL1

Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel

SD

1

SD

1 CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STAT

LOS2

SRV

LOS1

TX2 RX2TX1 RX1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 105: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicators

Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-69

Page 106: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interfaces

Table 3-53 SL1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

TX1 Transmit port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX1 Receive port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface

Table 3-54 SD1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

TX1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

TX2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LC (SFP)

RX2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 107: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.8.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

04 L-1.2 34060282

3.8.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 Byte

The board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-71

Page 108: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.8.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 109: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1

Item Description

SL1 SD1

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 290 g 300 g

Power consumption < 3 W < 3.9 W

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits2xSTM-1 electrical signals.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SLE/SDE.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

3.9.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.9.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

3.9.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits2xSTM-1 electrical signals.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-73

Page 110: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a linear MSP group.

l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the electrical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 111: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SLE/SDE.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCLine

interfaceunit

Overheadprocessing

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1 signalOverhead bus

SCC

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external STM-1 electrical signals are coupled bythe transformer and then are sent to the board.

2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Performs CMI decoding.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-75

Page 112: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

3 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

4 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes clock.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 113: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 Codec unit l Performs CMI coding.

4 Line interface unit l The STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by thetransformer and then are sent to the external cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-28 SLE front panel

SLE

SLE

STAT

SRV

R1 T1

Figure 3-29 SDE front panel

SD

E

SD

EST

ATSR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-77

Page 114: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicators

Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-62 SLE interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T Transmit port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

SMB STM-1e cable

R Receive port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

Table 3-63 SDE interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

SMB STM-1e cable

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 115: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

R1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

3.9.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE

Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.9.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-79

Page 116: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.9.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Electrical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.

Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Code pattern CMI

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

SLE SDE

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 300 g 330 g

Power consumption < 4.2 W < 4.9 W

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 117: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PL3.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.

3.10.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.10.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.

3.10.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the type of the accessed service signal by the software

(E3 or T3).

l Supports the setting and querying of the input/output equalization of the T3 service signal.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1 and C2 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1 and C2 bytes.

Clock Function

Supports the first and third E3/T3 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-81

Page 118: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E3/T3 tributary.

l Supports the PRBS 15 test.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PL3.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle

PXC

E1/T3

E1/T3

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E3/T3 signal is coupled by thetransformer and then is sent to the board.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 119: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.

l Restores the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs HDB3 decoding (in the case of E3 signals)or B3ZS decoding (in the case of T3 signals).

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.

l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to beVC-3.

l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.

l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.

l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving andare multiplexed into one C-4.

l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and theVC-4 is formed.

4 Logic processingunit

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.

l Processes the TU pointer and demultiplexes one VC-3from one TU-3.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Extracts E3/T3 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding (in the case of E3 signals) orB3ZS coding (in the case of T3 signals).

4 Line interface unit l The E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer andthen is sent to the external cable.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-83

Page 120: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel

PL3

PL3

STAT

SR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2 R3 T3

Indicators

Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 121: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interfaces

Table 3-70 PL3 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T1 Transmit port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB E3/T3 cable

R1 Receive port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

T3 Transmit port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB

R3 Receive port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

3.10.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PL3 PL3

PL3 PL3

PL3

Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3

Item description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-85

Page 122: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.10.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.10.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E3/T3 Interface Performance

The performance of the E3/T3 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance

Item Performance

E3 T3

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 34368 44736

Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 123: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Item Description

Weight 310 g

Power consumption < 5.1 W

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of thePH1/PD1 is SL61.

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.ThePD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PO1/PH1/PD1.

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

3.11.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of thebar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code.

3.11.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte.

3.11.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of thePH1/PD1 is SL61.

Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1

Item SL61PO1 SL62PO1

Connector type of E1interface

DB44 RJ-45

E1 interface impedance 75 ohm or 120 ohm 120 ohm

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-87

Page 124: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.ThePD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.l Supports the querying of the J2 and V5 bytes.l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 byte.

Clock Functionsl Supports the retiming function of E1 signals.l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E1 tributary.l Supports the PRBS 15 test.l Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PO1/PH1/PD1.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle

Logiccontrol

unit

PXC

E1

E1

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 125: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E1 signal is coupled by the transformerand then is sent to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.

l Restores the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-12.

l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to beVC-12.

l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-12.

l Three TU-12s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one TUG-2.

l Seven TUG-2s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one TUG-3.

l Three TUG-3s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one C-4.

l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and theVC-4 is formed.

4 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-89

Page 126: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow

2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.

l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Extracts E1 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

4 Line interface unit l The E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and thenis sent to the external cable.

Control Signal ProcessingThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC.

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 PO1 front panelP

O1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1~8

PO

1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SL61PO1

SL62PO1

Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel

PH

1

PH

1ST

ATSR

V

1~8 9~16

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 127: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel

PD1

PD1

STA

TSR

V

1-16 17-32

Indicators

Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1-8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-91

Page 128: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces RJ-45 The cables need to bemade on site byterminating networkcables with RJ-45connectors

Table 3-80 PH1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1-8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel

9-16 9 to 16 E1 interfaces DB44

Table 3-81 PD1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1-16 1 to 16 E1 interfaces MDR68 E1 transit cable

17-32 17 to 32 E1 interfaces MDR68

For the pin assignments of the DB44 interface of the SL61PO1/PH1 board, see Figure 3-38 andrefer toTable 3-82. For the pin assignment of the RJ-45 interface of the SL62PO1 board, seeFigure 3-39, and refer to Table 3-83. For the pin assignments of the MDR68 interface of thePD1 board, see Figure 3-40 and refer to Table 3-85.

Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 44

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 129: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

15 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

30 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 23 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-)

14 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 37 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

29 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 22 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

13 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 36 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

28 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 21 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

12 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 35 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 20 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

11 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 34 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

26 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 19 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

10 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 33 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

25 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 18 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

9 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 32 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

24 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 17 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

8 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 31 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

7 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 16 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

Others Reserved - -

Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

Interface Pin Signal

n (n: 1-8) 1 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (+)

2 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (-)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-93

Page 130: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interface Pin Signal

4 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (+)

5 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (-)

3, 6, 7, 8 Reserved

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-84.

Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

Indicator Status Meaning

Yellow indicator On The E1 signal is lost.

Off The E1 signal is normal.

Green indicator - Reserved.

Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 68

Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

36 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

35 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 37 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-)

42 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 40 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

41 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 39 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

46 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 44 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

45 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 43 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

50 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 48 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

49 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 47 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-94 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 131: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

3 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

4 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

7 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

8 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

11 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 9 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

12 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 10 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

15 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 13 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

16 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 14 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

22 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 20 9th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

21 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 19 9th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

26 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 24 10th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

25 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 23 10th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

30 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 28 11th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

29 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 27 11th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

34 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 32 12th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

33 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 31 12th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

55 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 53 13th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

56 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 54 13th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

59 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 57 14th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

60 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 58 14th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

63 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 61 15th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

64 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 62 15th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

67 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 65 16th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

68 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 66 16th E1 receiving differential signal (-)

Others Reserved - -

3.11.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-95

Page 132: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1

PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1

PO1/PH1/PD1

Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620

slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of thebar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code.

Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (ohm)

A 75

B 120

3.11.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte.

J2 Byte

The board supports two modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-96 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 133: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.11.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E1 Interface PerformanceThe performance of the E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-88 E1 interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Code pattern HDB3

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1

Item Description

PO1 PH1 PD1

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 280 g 310 g 380 g

Powerconsumption

< 2 W < 2.8 W < 5.8 W

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFT4.

3.12.4 Front Panel

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-97

Page 134: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.12.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

3.12.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.

Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B

Function SL61EFT4VER.A SL61EFT4VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that

ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes.l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.

l Supports the IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet port.

l Supports the point-to-point link state pass through (LPT) function (only theSL61EFT4VER.B provides this function).

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports and LPT, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: high level data link control (HDLC), link

access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP).l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.

l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X =1-6).

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-98 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 135: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS).

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFT4.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-99

Page 136: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE

FE

Service bus Control bus FE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

module

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12/VC-3 level for the dataframes after encapsulation.

5 Logic processingunit

Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-100 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 137: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12/VC-3 level.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.

4 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.

5 Interface processingmodule

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sendsthe generated FE signal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.12.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel

EFT

4

EFT

4

FE2 FE3

STAT

SRV

FE1 FE4

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-101

Page 138: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicators

Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

FE1-FE4 Fast Ethernet serviceinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

For the front view and pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces, see Figure 3-44 and refer toTable 3-95.

Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-102 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 139: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces

Interface Pin Signal

FE1-FE4 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

FE1-FE4 interfaces each have two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-96.

Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-103

Page 140: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.12.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters

The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode

– 16-byte mode with CRC

– 16-byte mode without CRC

– 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ".

l J2 byteThe board supports two modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode

– 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port Parameters

The EFT4 provides four external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT4. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows: port enabled, working mode, maximumframe length, and flow control.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working modeThe board supports three working modes as follows:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-104 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 141: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

– Auto-negotiation

– 10M full-duplex

– 100M full-duplex

By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts the auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, or 100M full-duplex mode, the localequipment should be set to the same working mode. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts 10M half-duplex or 100M half-duplex, the local equipment should be set to theauto-negotiation mode.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

l Flow controlThe board supports three flow control modes as follows:– Disabled mode

– Autonegotiation flow control mode

– Non-autonegotiation flow control mode

By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode.The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port has the following abilities:– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE

frames– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received

PAUSE frames– Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during

congestionThe non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Send only

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-105

Page 142: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

The flow control parameter should be set depending on that of the equipment on the oppositeside.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EFT4 provides four internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK4, corresponding toPORT1 to PORT4 respectively. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internalport are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l Bound pathAll the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.12.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

FE electrical Interface PerformanceFE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ-45

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-106 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 143: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 306 g

Power consumption 7.5 W

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmissionservices and Layer 2 switching services.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EMS6.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.13.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

3.13.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

3.13.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-107

Page 144: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B

Function SL61EMS6VER.A SL61EMS6VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmissionservices and Layer 2 switching services.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Provides GE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces by using two SFP modules. The

GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface.l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are as follows:– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-

duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working

modes.l Supports the setting and querying of the network attributes of the Ethernet ports. The

following three network attributes are available: UNI, C-aware, and S-aware.l Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes

of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of anEthernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is setto UNI.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length thatranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.External ports PORT1-PORT6 and internal ports VCTRUNK5-VCTRUNK8 supportJUMBO frames. Internal ports VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 do not support JUMBO frames.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x (only fortransparently transmitted Ethernet services).

l Supports the point-to-point LPT function and the point-to-multipoint LPT function (onlythe SL61EMS6VER.B provides this function).

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.

l Supports Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports, LPT, LAG, and ERPS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Servicesl Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-108 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 145: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapidspanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w.

l Supports the IGMP snooping.

NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processingl Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad.

l Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet Service QoS Processingl Supports the following traffic classifications:

– Port-based traffic classification

– Port+CVLAN-based traffic classification

– Port+SVLAN-based traffic classification

– Port+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l Supports traffic-based CAR.

l Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocatespackets to different egress queues.

l Supports PORT-based or PORT queue-based traffic shaping.

l An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP, WRR, or SP+WRRqueue scheduling mode.

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet QoS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet OAM Processingl Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

– Management of OAM maintenance points

– Continuity check test

– Loopback test

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-109

Page 146: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

– Link trace test

– Ping test

– Performance test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:– OAM automatic discovery

– Link performance monitoring

– Fault detection

– Remote loopback initiating

– Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Traffic Statisticsl Supports traffic monitoring over Ethernet interfaces. The received traffic threshold can be

set for Ethernet interfaces and an alarm is reported when the received traffic exceeds thethreshold.

l Supports traffic statistics over Ethernet interfaces. The period of traffic statistics is 15minutes and the statistic data can be stored for 30 days.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: HDLC, LAPS, and GFP.

l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.

l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X =1-6).

l Supports the LCAS.

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

l Supports RMON performance events and alarms.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-110 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 147: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the SFP module.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected.When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset isperformed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset isperformed, services can be interrupted.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EMS6.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE/GE

FE/GE

Service bus Control bus FE/GE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

moduleMail box

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-111

Page 148: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE/GE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.Classifies the traffic according to the service format andconfiguration requirements (for example, Ethernetpacket, VLAN packet, and other packet format).Processes tags according to the service type.Forwards data frames according to the service type.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level for the dataframes after encapsulation.

5 Logic processingunit

Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.

4 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.Forwards data frames according to the service type.Processes tags according to the service type.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-112 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 149: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 Interface processingmodule

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for theEthernet frame signal, and sends the generated FE/GEsignal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The communication and control module of the EMS6 consists of the CPU and its peripheralcircuits. The EMS6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration dataand querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EMS6 through thecommunication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside theEMS6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through thecommunication and control module.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel

EM

S6

EM

S6

FE2FE1 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2

STAT

PRO

GSR

VLI

NK1

ACTI

V1LI

NK2

ACTI

V2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Indicators

Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-113

Page 150: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Green indicator (LINK1) On The link at the GE1 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE1 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing The GE1 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE1 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Green indicator (LINK2) On The link at the GE2 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE2 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2) On or flashing The GE2 port is transmittingor receiving data.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-114 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 151: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The GE2 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Interfaces

Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description

Interface

Description Type of Connector Cable

FE1-FE4 Fast Ethernetservice interface

RJ-45 Network cable.

GE1-GE2

Gigabit Ethernetservice interface

Replaceable SFP modulel Optical module: Uses the

LC connector, andsupports 1000BASE-SXand 1000BASE-LX.

l Electrical module: Usesthe RJ-45 connector andsupports10/100/1000BASE-T(X).

l When the optical moduleis used, use the fiberjumper.

l When the electricalmodule is used, use thenetwork cable.

The FE port and GE electrical port of the EMS6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensingmode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-48 and referto Table 3-105 and Table 3-106.

Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-115

Page 152: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-116 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 153: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-107.

Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

LabelThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EMS6.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface of the EMS6 islower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-117

Page 154: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.13.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6

Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module

01 1000BASE-SX (0.55 km) 34060286

02 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 34060219

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

3.13.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH ParametersThe J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byteThe board supports the following four modes: single-byte mode, 16-byte mode with CRC,16-byte mode without CRC, and 64-byte mode. By default, the board does not monitor thereceived J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byteto be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and thefollowing 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after thecharacter string).

l J2 byteThe board supports the following two modes: single-byte mode and 16-byte mode withCRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to bereceived is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC.The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code"HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

Ethernet External Port ParametersThe EMS6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-118 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 155: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Basic attributes

l TAG attributes

l Network attributes

l Flow control

l Advanced attributes

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working mode– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-

duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working

modes.Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working modeof the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. TheTAG attributes include the following parameters:

l TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be setto TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware.The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do

not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port addsa TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packetsthat contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

l Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parametercan be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If thisparameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparentlytransmits the received packet.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-119

Page 156: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for theport. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed.The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, thenetwork attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

l C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

l S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes:autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control modeaccording to the auto-negotiation result.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.– Send only

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcastpacket suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services andalso effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-120 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 157: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and BroadcastPacket Suppression Threshold.l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the portdoes not use the broadcast packet suppression function.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the portdiscards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcastpackets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the rangefrom 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceedsNx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EMS6 provides eight internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK8. The parametersthat you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mappingprotocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed.The TAG attributes include the following parameters:– TAG

The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can beset to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAGaware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and

discards the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that

do not contain a TAG. In the case of packets that do not contain a TAG, the portadds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case ofpackets that contain a TAG, the port simply receives the packets without any change.

– Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. Thisparameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled.If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the porttransparently transmits the received packet.

– Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID forthe port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLANID is 1.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services areprocessed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-121

Page 158: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are asfollows:

– UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

– C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

– S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

l Bound path

All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCAS

The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.13.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

GE Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the GE optical interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 1000

Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-122 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 159: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can usedifferent types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes andtransmission distances.

GE Electrical Interface PerformanceThe GE electrical interface is 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface and compliant with IEEE 802.3.The GE electrical interface is compatible with FE electrical interfaces. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules to provide 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interfaces.

FE electrical Interface PerformanceFE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ-45

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-123

Page 160: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 400 g

Power consumption < 12.3 W

3.14 EFP6The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supportstransparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFP6.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620.

3.14.6 NM Configuration ReferenceOn the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernetexternal port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

3.14.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanicalbehavior, and power consumption.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supportstransparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-124 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 161: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Sets and queries working modes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports five working modes

of Ethernet interfaces, namely, 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100Mhalf duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Sets and queries network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three networkattributes of Ethernet interfaces, UNI, C-Aware, and S-Aware.

l Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributesof Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of anEthernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is setto UNI.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame lengthranging from 1518 to 2000 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with the maximum frame length of 2000 bytes.

l Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet interfaces (only for transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services).

l Supports the point-to-point and point-to-multipoint link state pass through (LPT) functions.

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.

NOTE

For details on features of Ethernet interfaces, LPT, and LAG, see theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Servicesl Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapidspanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w.

l Supports the IGMP snooping.

NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processingl Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad.

l Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-125

Page 162: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Ethernet Service QoS Processingl Supports the following traffic classifications:

– PORT-based traffic classification

– PORT+VLAN-based traffic classification

– PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI-based traffic classification

– PORT+SVLAN-based traffic classification

– PORT+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocatespackets to different egress queues.

l Supports traffic-based CAR.

l Supports PORT queue-based traffic shaping.

l An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP+WRR queuescheduling mode.

NOTE

For details on the Ethernet QoS, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Ethernet OAM Processingl Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

– Management of OAM maintenance points

– Continuity check test

– Loopback test

– Link trace test

– Ping test

– Performance test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:– OAM automatic discovery

– Link performance monitoring

– Fault detection

– Remote loopback initiating

– Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the GFP encapsulation format.

l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 63xE1.

l Supports virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv (X = 1-16). When implemented on theNMS, virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv is considered as virtual concatenationmapping at VC-12-Xv.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-126 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 163: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports LCAS.

NOTE

For details on encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Queries the J2 and V5 bytes.

l Sets the J2 and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports port mirroring.

l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports VC-12 inloop toward the backplane direction.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected.When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset isperformed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset isperformed, services can be interrupted.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFP6.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-127

Page 164: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE

FE

Service bus Control bus FE signal

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

moduleMail box

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.Classifies the traffic according to the service format andconfiguration requirements (for example, Ethernetpacket, VLAN packet, and other packet format).Processes tags according to the service type.Forwards data frames according to the service type.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames.

4 Mapping module Maps the encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtualconcatenation and then encapsulates the data frames tothe corresponding VC-12s.

5 Logic processingunit

Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-128 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 165: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Extracts the E1 payload from the VC-12s and demaps theE1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.

4 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.Forwards data frames according to the service type.Processes tags according to the service type.

5 Interface processingmodule

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sendsthe generated FE signal to the Ethernet interface.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe communication and control module of the EFP6 consists of the CPU and its peripheralcircuits. The EFP6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration dataand querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EFP6 through thecommunication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside theEFP6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through thecommunication and control module.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.

Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6

EFP6

EFP6

FE2FE1 FE3 FE4 FE5 FE6

STAT

PRO

GSR

V

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-129

Page 166: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicators

Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-130 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 167: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interfaces

Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6

Interface

Description Type of Connector Corresponding Cable

FE1-FE6 Fast Ethernetservice interface

RJ-45 Network cable

The FE interfaces on the EFP6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing modes. For the frontview and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-52 and refer to Table 3-118 andTable 3-119.

Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 RX- Receiving data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-131

Page 168: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 TX- Transmitting data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-120.

Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFP6 EFP6

EFP6 EFP6

EFP6

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-132 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 169: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.14.6 NM Configuration ReferenceOn the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernetexternal port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH ParametersByte J2 is the SDH parameter that you may frequently set.

The board supports the single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the boarddoes not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disabledmode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically createdand the other 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The last five characters of thestring are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port ParametersThe EFP6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows:

l Basic attributes

l TAG attributes

l Network attributes

l Flow control

l Advanced attributes

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working modeIn the case of FE electrical ports, there are four working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10Mfull-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation .Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working modeof the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 2000 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-133

Page 170: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. TheTAG attributes include the following parameters:

l TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be setto TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware.The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do

not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port addsa TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packetsthat contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

l Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parametercan be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If thisparameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparentlytransmits the received packet.

l Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for theport. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed.The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, thenetwork attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

l C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

l S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric flow control

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-134 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 171: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port has the following abilities:– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE

frames– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received

PAUSE frames– Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during

congestionl The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– DisabledThe port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Send onlyThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcastpacket suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services andalso effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for thebroadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and BroadcastPacket Suppression Threshold.l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the portdoes not use the broadcast packet suppression function.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the portdiscards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcastpackets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the rangefrom 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceedsNx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port Parameters

The EFP6 provides 16 internal ports, namely, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK16. The parametersthat you may frequently set for each internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol,network attribute, bound path, and LCAS.

l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed.The TAG attributes include the following parameters:

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-135

Page 172: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

– TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can beset to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAGaware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and

discards the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that

do not contain a TAG. The port adds a TAG to the packets that do not contain a TAGaccording to the VLAN ID of the port.

– Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. Thisparameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled.If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the porttransparently transmits the received packet.

– Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID forthe port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLANID is 1.

l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services areprocessed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. Bydefault, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are asfollows:– UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI

port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.– C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.– S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.l Bound path

On the EFP6, a VCTRUNK can bind VC-12 channels (Ethernet services are encapsulatedto the payload of VC-12 channels, namely, to E1 signals). A VCTRUNK can bind amaximum of 16 VC-12 channels.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.14.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanicalbehavior, and power consumption.

FE electrical Interface PerformanceFE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-136 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 173: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ-45

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6

Item Performance

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 400 g

Power consumption < 11.6 W

3.15 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies powerto other boards.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the PXC.

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label onthe front panel.

3.15.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3.

3.15.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

3.15.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronizationperformance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and powerconsumption.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-137

Page 174: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies powerto other boards.

Power Processingl Receives one input of -48 V/-60 V power.

l Outputs one -48 V and one +3.3 V power for other boards.

l Supplies power to the components of the board.

l Detects and protects the input power.

Clock Processingl Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and frame headers of service signals

and overhead signals for other boards.l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the

system clock source. The service clock source can be line, tributary, or microwave clocksource.

l Supports clock protection based on clock priority, SSM protocol, or extended SSMprotocol.

l Supports the detection of the external clock source.

l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.

l One PXC supports one input and one output of the external clock.

l The external clock interface can be used as the wayside service interface.

l The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes, synchronous dataoverhead bytes, asynchronous data overhead bytes, and orderwire overhead bytes.

Cross-Connection Processingl Grooms inter-board service signals.

l Provides full timeslot cross-connection of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 equivalent to 16x16 VC-4.

l Provides cross-connection of 16x16 pointer indication signals.

l Supports service signal broadcasting.

l Supports the AU_AIS alarm being transparently transmitted by the service path that VC-4scan pass through.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 standby for the input power and 1+1 standby for the internal power module.

l Supports 1+1 hot standby of its clock unit and cross-connect unit.

l Supports the SNCP switching.

l Supports the linear MSP.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-138 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 175: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring on STM-4 optical transmission links.

l Supports the HSB switching.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the board temperature.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTEWhen a warm reset is performed, the software modules of the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected.When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized(if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can beinterrupted.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the PXC.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC

Backplane

Other boardsCross-connect

unit

SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

Clock signal

Clockunit

Externalclockunit

Powerunit

Logiccontrol

unit

External clock signal

Service boards

Other boards-48V -48V

+3.3V

External Clock UnitIn the receive direction, the external clock unit accesses one 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s signal. If thesignal accessed is a wayside service signal, it is multiplexed into a 2M timeslot of an 8M overheadsignal and then sent to the SCC. If the signal accessed is a clock signal, it is sent to the clockunit.

In the transmit direction, to output the external clock, the unit receives an external clock signalfrom the clock unit. To output the wayside service signal, the unit demultiplexes the waysideservice signal from the 8M overhead signal.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-139

Page 176: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Clock UnitThe clock unit detects and selects the external clock source or the service clock source fromservice boards. Through the phase-locked loop, the unit outputs the system clock and frameheaders of service signals and overhead signals for other units on the PXC and also other boards.

Cross-Connect UnitThe cross-connect unit is a three-level cross-connect matrix. The first level and the third levelare space division cross-connect matrixes that support VC-4 cross-connection only, with a cross-connect capacity of 16x16 VC-4s. The first level is called forward cross-connection and the thirdlevel is called backward cross-connection. The second level is a time division matrix thatsupports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connection, with the cross-connect capacity equivalent to16x16 VC-4s. It is called lower order cross-connection.

The lower order cross-connect matrix is the core of a cross-connect unit. The forward andbackward cross-connect matrixes are used to improve the speed at which the cross-connect unitimplements service protection switching.

Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

...

Forwardcross-connectmatrix

...

Lower ordercross-connectmatrix

Backward cross-connectmatrix

... ...

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

16x16 VC-4Equivalent

to16x16 VC-4

16x16 VC-4

Power UnitThe power unit processes the input -48 V/-60 V power as follows:

1. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from very high input current.2. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from reverse polar connection of the input

power.3. Performs EMI filtering for the input current and detects whether the input current is very

high or very low.4. Distributes one power input to the -48 V power bus in the backplane, to supply -48 V power

to the SCC and IF boards.5. Uses a DC/AC power module to convert the other power input into +3.3 V power and then

sends it to the +3.3 V power bus in the backplane, to supply +3.3 V power to the otherboards.

The power unit also supplies power to the chips on the PXC.

Logic Control UnitThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-140 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 177: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label onthe front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-56 PXC front panel

PXC

PXC

STA

T

AC

T

PW

RS

YN

C

-48V--60V SYS-PWR

CLKO CLKINEG(-) RTN(+) PULL

Indicators

Table 3-124 PXC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost, orswitching occurs to the clocksource.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-141

Page 178: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-125 PXC interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

CLKI External clock/wayside serviceinput port

SMB External clockcable/waysideservice cable

CLIO External clock/wayside serviceoutput port

RTN(+) Power input (+) Type-D Power cable

NEG(-) Power output (-)

SYS-PWRa Input power switch - -

NOTE

a: The SYS-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation guidance label on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-142 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 179: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.15.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3.

Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 1 > slot 3

NOTEWhen the system is powered on and the two PXCs are already seated, the PXC in slot 1 is the active boardand the one in slot 3 is the standby. If one PXC is inserted when another is already in the working state,the existing board becomes the active board and the newly inserted board becomes the standby board.

3.15.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

Clock Source and Clock Source PrioritySupports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the systemclock source. The service clock source can be a line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Selectthe required clock source and then set the clock source priority.

By default, the PXC employs the internal clock source, that is, the clock working in the free-runmode.

Clock ProtectionFor the PXC, clocks are protected based on the clock source priority, SSM, or extended SSMprotocols. Determine the clock protection scheme as required.

By default, the PXC protects clocks according to the clock source priority.

Input External Clock Parameter SettingTo input an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock. If the SSMor extended SSM protocols are enabled, also set the S1 byte of the external clock.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-143

Page 180: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Output External Clock Parameter SettingTo output an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock and also theclock source traced by the 2M phase-locked loop.

3.15.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronizationperformance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and powerconsumption.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization source 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703§9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and holdoverperformance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of themicrowave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-144 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 181: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

Weight 540 g

Power consumption < 7.5 W

3.16 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.16.1 Version DescriptionThe SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C andSL61SCCVER.E.

3.16.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also variousmanagement and auxiliary interfaces.

3.16.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the SCC .

3.16.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator testswitch, and labels on the front panel.

3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage CardThe SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card.

3.16.6 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2.

3.16.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IPaddress, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, andasynchronous data interface parameters.

3.16.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance,synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.16.1 Version DescriptionThe SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C andSL61SCCVER.E.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-145

Page 182: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions

Item SL61SCCVER.B SL61SCCVER.C SL61SCCVER.E

Synchronous datainterface

Does not provide theinterface.

1 1

Orderwire spanningfunction

Does not support thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Power module Provides the module. Does not provide themodule.

Provides the module.

3.16.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also variousmanagement and auxiliary interfaces.

System Control and Communicationsl Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and

ODUs by using the NE software.l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the SCC.

The board software of all the other boards except the EMS6 is integrated on the SCC.l Collects performance events and alarms.

l Communicates with the NM system and processes at most 12-channel DCC.

l Cross-connects overheads.

Management and Auxiliary Interfacesl Provides one NM interface and one NE cascade interface.

l Provides one management serial port.

l Provides one 6-input and 2-output alarm interface.

l Provides one asynchronous data interface.

l Provides one 64 kbit/s G.703-compliant synchronous data interface (only the SL61SCC ofVER.C or VER.E provides this function).

l Provides one orderwire interface.

l Supports the setting of the synchronous data interface as a transparent transmissioninterface for orderwire bytes to realize the orderwire spanning function (only the SL61SCCof VER.C or VER.E provides this function).

Protection Processingl Processes the protection switching of 1+1 protection configuration.

l Processes clock protection switching.

l Processes linear MSP switching.

l Processes the protection switching of a two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-146 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 183: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

l Processes SNCP switching.

l Provides +3.3 V power standby protection (Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.Eprovides this function).

Maintenance Featuresl Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the board temperature.

l Supports the detecting of all the indicators of the boards.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

3.16.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the SCC .

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC

Backplane

Overhead bus Control bus

Overheadcross-

connectunit

Auxiliaryinterface

unit

Control andcommunication

unit

ODU control signal

-48V

+3.3V

Other boards

PXCPowerunit Other boards

Other boards

Orderwire interface

Asynchronous data interface

External alarm input/output interface

NM interface

NE cascade interface

Debugging serial portIF1A/IF1B

Synchronous data interface

NOTE

l The SL61SCC of VER.B does not have the synchronous data interface.

l The SL61SCC of VER.C does not have the power unit.

Auxiliary Interface UnitThe auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E processes the input and outputof the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and externalalarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by thecontrol and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface, asynchronous datainterface, and synchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unitthrough the overhead bus.

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.B processes the input and output of theorderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/output

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-147

Page 184: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

information of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit.The data of the orderwire interface and asynchronous data interface is interworked with theoverhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus.

Overhead Cross-Connect UnitThe overhead cross-connect unit cross-connects the overheads from the auxiliary unit, controland communication unit, and other boards, and thus the following functions are realized.

l The DCC processed by the control and communication unit is added/dropped to/from theline.

l The orderwire and asynchronous data is added/dropped to/from the line.

l The orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between lines can be interworked.

Control and Communication UnitThe control and communication unit is composed of a CPU and its peripheral circuit. This unitperforms the following functions:

l Controls and manages the IDU and other boards, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by the ODU control signal transmitted between the serialport and the SMODEM in the IF board.

l Communicates with the NM system by processing DCC bytes and the NM data that aretransmitted from the NM interface.

l Performs configuration management, performance management, and alarm managementaccording to NM commands.

l Performs protection management.

Power UnitOnly the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides the power unit.

The power unit performs the following functions:l Converts the input -48 V power into +3.3 V power.

l Realizes the backup function of the internal power modules.

l Supplies power to the chips on the SCC.

3.16.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator testswitch, and labels on the front panel.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-148 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 185: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 SCC front panel

SC

C

SC

CETH ETH-HUB

COMPHONE

ALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM

PHONEALM/S1

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E

SCCVER.B

Indicators

Table 3-131 SCC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-149

Page 186: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the memory self-checkfails or loading upper layersoftware fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.

Off The software is runningnormally.

ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.

Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Interfaces

Table 3-132 SCC interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-11 Orderwire line

COM Management port DB9 Serial port cable

ETH NM Ethernetinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

ETH-HUB NE cascade interface RJ-45 Network cable

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-150 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 187: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

ALM/AUX(SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E )ALM/S1(SCCVER.B)

l SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E :external alarminterface/synchronous datainterface/asynchronous datainterface

l SCCVER.B:external alarminterface/asynchronous datainterface

DB26 Auxiliary interfacecable

RST Ward reset switch - -

LAMP TEST Indicator test switcha - -

NOTE

a: Press the LAMP TEST button, and all the indicators of the IDU turn on except for the indicators on theEthernet interface. Release the button, and the indicators return to the original state.

For the pin assignments of the COM interface, see Figure 3-60 and refer to Table 3-133.

Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface

Pos.9

Pos.1

Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface

Interface Pin Signal

COM 2 Receiving data

3 Transmitting data

4 Data terminal ready

5 Ground

1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Reserved

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-151

Page 188: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

For the pin assignments of the ETH or the ETH-HUB connector, see Figure 3-61 and refer toTable 3-134.

Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

Interface Pin Signal

ETH/ETH-HUB 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

NOTEThe ETH/ETH-HUB interface supports MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing, which means it can also transmit datathrough pins 3 and 6, and receive data through pins 1 and 3.

The ETH/ETH-HUB interface has two indicators. For the description of the two indicators, referto Table 3-135.

Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting or receivingdata.

Off The port is not transmitting or receivingdata.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-152 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 189: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

CAUTIONThe ETH and the ETH-HUB are like two ports of a hub. When the two ports are used innetworking, they cannot be connected to each other through Ethernet links. Otherwise, anEthernet loop is formed which can result in a network storm and repeated NE resetting. Figure3-62 shows two wrong connection modes.

Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

LAN

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

For the pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface, see Figure 3-63 and refer toTable 3-136.

Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface

Pos.1

Pos.26

Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface

Interface Pin Signal

ALM/AUX(ALM/S1)

1 The 1st input alarm signal

10 Ground of the 1st input alarm signal

19 The 2nd input alarm signal

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-153

Page 190: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Interface Pin Signal

2 Ground of the 2nd input alarm signal

11 The 3rd input alarm signal

20 Ground of the 3rd input alarm signal

3 The 1st output alarm signal (+)

21 The 1st output alarm signal (-)

4 The 4th input alarm signal

13 Ground of the 4th input alarm signal

22 The 5th input alarm signal

5 Ground of the 5th input alarm signal

14 The 6th input alarm signal

23 Ground of the 6th input alarm signal

6 The 2nd output alarm signal (+)

24 The 2nd output alarm signal (-)

16 The asynchronous interfacetransmitting data

8 The asynchronous interface receivingdata

25 Signal ground

7 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (+)

9 Signal ground

12 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (-)

15 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (+)

17 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (-)

18, 26 Reserved

NOTE

The SCC of VER.B does not support the synchronous data interface. Hence, pins 7, 12, 15, and 17 of theALM/AUX interface cannot be used.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-154 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 191: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation warning label on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protectivegloves before touching the board.

3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage CardThe SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card.

The storage card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

l All the FPGA logics

l License file for radio link capability

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-155

Page 192: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card

2

1

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

2

1

JUMP4JUMP3

JUMP2JUMP1

SL61SCCVER.B

Jumper definition

10

21

9

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

SL61SCCVER.C or SL61SCCVER.E

1. Jumpers 2. Storage card

Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

0 0 0 0 Normaloperating state.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Reserved.

0 0 1 1 Commissioningstate.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-156 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 193: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

0 1 0 0 Operating state,with theWatchDogdisabled andmemoryundergone fullcheck.

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdoverstate. Even if theNE softwareexists, it is notrunning. The IPaddress isalways129.9.0.5. TheIP in theparameter areadoes not changefor theconvenience ofquerying.

0 1 1 0 Exhibitionmode.

0 1 1 1 Data recoverstate.

1 0 0 0 Reserved.

1 0 0 1 Reserved.

1 0 1 0 To erase thesystemparameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erasedatabase.

1 1 0 0 To erase NEsoftware and itspatches.

1 1 0 1 To erasedatabase, NEsoftware and itspatches.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-157

Page 194: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

1 1 1 0 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased.

1 1 1 1 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased (filesystem +extended BIOS+ systemparameter area).

3.16.6 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2.

Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTEAn SCC integrates an EOW subboard which occupies the logical slot 21.

3.16.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IPaddress, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, andasynchronous data interface parameters.

NE IDThe NE ID is a 24-bit hexadecimal number, which is used to identify the NE in ECCcommunication. The higher 8 bits of an NE ID are called the subnet ID, or the extended ID,whereas the lower 16 bits are called the basic ID. For example, for the NE ID 0x090001, "9" isthe subnet ID or extended ID and "1" is the basic ID.

By default, the NE ID is 0x09BFF0, with the subnet ID or extended ID as "9" and the basic IDas "49136".

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-158 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 195: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

NE IP Address

IP addresses are used and thus are valid only in TCP/IP communication.

By default, the NE IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Orderwire Interface Parameters

Orderwire interface parameters include the orderwire phone number and the overhead byte usedto transmit orderwire.

The orderwire phone number is used to identify the phone in point-to-point addressing call. Thisparameter is set based on the orderwire planning. Generally, the orderwire phone number is setwith three digits.

The overhead byte used to transmit orderwire can be set to use the E1 or E2 byte, however, thissetting is invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses amicrowave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of whether the E1 or E2 byte isset.

Synchronous Data Interface Parameters

In the case of optical and electrical SDH lines, the synchronous data interface always uses theF1 byte. In the case of SDH/PDH microwave links, the synchronous data interface always usesa microwave self-defined byte.

Asynchronous Interface Parameters

Asynchronous interface parameters include the asynchronous data interface type and theoverhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data.

The asynchronous data interface type is RS-232.

The overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data can be set to any byte of Serial 1 to Serial4, as shown in Figure 3-66. This setting is, however, invalid for SDH/PDH microwave linksbecause the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire,regardless of which serial byte is set.

Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2AU- PTRB2 B2 B2 K1 K2D4 Serial 4 D5 D6D7 D8 D9D10 D11 D12 Serial 3S1 M1 E2

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-159

Page 196: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.16.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance,synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTNequipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, the orderwire phones of all the OptiXRTN equipment in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwirephone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 64

Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-160 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 197: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

Weight 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)

Power consumption < 7.0 W

3.17 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3.17.1 CompositionThe fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proofenvironment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter.

3.17.2 Version DescriptionThe fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN andSL61FANA.

3.17.3 Functions and FeaturesThe fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling.

3.17.4 Working PrincipleThis section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principleof the fan board in the fan tray assembly.

3.17.5 Front PanelThere is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

3.17.6 Valid SlotsThe fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-161

Page 198: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

3.17.1 CompositionThe fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proofenvironment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter.

Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition

Panel

Air filter

Fan board

3.17.2 Version DescriptionThe fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN andSL61FANA.

Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA

Item SL61FAN SL61FANA

Number of fans 6 3

Power -48 V +3.3 V

3.17.3 Functions and FeaturesThe fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling.

The fan tray assembly also supports the following functions:

l Detecting faults in the fan and reports alarms.

l Querying the manufacturing information.

3.17.4 Working PrincipleThis section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principleof the fan board in the fan tray assembly.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-162 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 199: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board

Controland

detectionunit

SCC

Powerunit +3.3V

+3.3V+12V

Backplane

Fan unit

Power UnitThe power unit converts the input +3.3 V power into the +12 V power according to therequirement of the fan unit. The 1+1 power standby protection is also provided for the system.In addition, the power unit provides +3.3 V power for the control and detection unit.

Fan UnitThe fan unit consists of three fans that work at the same time to dissipate heat from the IDU.The fan unit integrates a detection circuit, so that the fan unit can report the fan status and alarmsto the control and detection unit.

Control and Detection UnitPoint-to-point communication is performed between the control and detection unit and the SCC.The functions of the control and detection unit are as follows:l Reports the fan status and alarms to the SCC.

l Provides the manufacturing information for the SCC.

3.17.5 Front PanelThere is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-163

Page 200: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-69 FAN front panel

禁止接触风扇叶片!

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVE !

FAN

ATTENTIONCLEAN PERIODICALLY!

Indicators

Table 3-143 FAN indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

3.17.6 Valid SlotsThe fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

3-164 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 201: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-165

Page 202: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 203: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the IDU include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Youcan select the accessories depending on the requirements.

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 204: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panelR1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Interfaces

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector

T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to16th E1 ports (connected tothe external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16thE1 ports (connected to theexternal equipment)

1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connectedto an IDU)

DB37

9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports(connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a protectionground cable

-

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer toTable 4-2.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 205: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

2 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

3 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

22 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

23 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

4 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

5 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

24 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

25 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

6 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

7 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

26 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

8 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

9 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

36 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

35 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

17 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

16 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

34 6th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

33 6th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

15 6th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

14 6th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

32 7th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

31 7th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

13 7th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

12 7th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 206: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

30 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

29 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

11 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

10 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The defaultpower distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 207: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 PDU front panel

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4

1 4

1 2 3 4

OUTPUT OUTPUTA B

2

20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A

5 6

1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces

Table 4-3 PDU interface description

Position Interface Description

Output powerterminals (A)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

PGND (Groundingstud of the two-hole OTterminal)

For connecting the protection grounding cable

Input powerterminals

RTN1(+) The 1st power input (+)

RTN2(+) The 2nd power input (+)

NEG1(-) The 1st power input (-)

NEG2(-) The 2nd power input (-)

Output powerterminals (B)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 208: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Position Interface Description

Powerswitches (A)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A siderespectively.

Powerswitches (B)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B siderespectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

Functionsl The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.l Each input power supply supports four outputs.l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

Working PrincipleThe PDU primarily consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers(MCBs). The PDU provides the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4

SW4

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PGND

BGND

BGND

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 209: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The defaultpower distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that isinside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuitsterminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.

Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution ModeTo use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 210: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 211: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This section describes the purpose, appearance, and connections of various cables of the IDU.

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620system.

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the otherend of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e CableExternal clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface CableAuxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 212: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connectsthe interface of the orderwire phone set.

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 213: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620system.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable

X3

M0201 Main label

Two cable ties

2

X2200mm

500mmL

100mmX1

AA3

A2

A1

ALabel

1. Cable connector, type-D, 3 female 2. Single cord end terminal

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-1 Power cable connections

Cable Connector Cord EndTerminal

Connections Color of Core Wire

X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2. Blue (-48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3. Black (powerground)

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 214: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

The protection ground cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipmentshare the same ground.

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 PanelThe protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground pointof the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and otherequipment share one ground.

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground CableThe protection ground cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipmentshare the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable

2

Main label

H.S.TubeCable Tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT2

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 PanelThe protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground pointof the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and otherequipment share one ground.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 215: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel

1

Main label

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

NOTE

No IF jumper is required if the 5D type IF cable is used. The 5D type IF cable is connected to the IF boardthrough a TNC connector.

For details about the IF cable, see ODU Hardware Description.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG223 cable. The IF jumper uses a type-N connector at one end toconnect to the IF cable, and a TNC connector at the other end to connect to the IF board.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 216: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2PcsL=3cm

2000mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPICcable is connected to the XPIC IN port of one IFX board of an XPIC working group, and theother end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC OUT port of the other IFX board of thesame XPIC working group.

When the XPIC function of an IFX board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the XPICIN port and XPIC OUT port of the IFX board to loop back signals.

The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:

l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the IFXboards in slots 5 and 6 or the IFX boards in slots 7 and 8.

l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is veryshort, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the vertical direction, for example, theIFX boards in slots 5 and 7 or the IFX boards in slots 6 and 8. The XPIC cable using straightconnectors is also used to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the same IFXboard to loop back signals.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 217: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

L1

1 1

L2

2 2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the otherend of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

Types of fiber jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC FC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 218: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC LC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

NOTEFThe Ie-1.1 optical interface and the 1000Base-SX GE optical interface use multi-mode fibers.

Fiber Connectors

The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors. They are LC/PCconnectors, SC/PC connectors, and FC/PC connectors.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 219: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

The following E1 cables can be delivered together with the equipment:l The E1 cables to the external equipment(with DB44 connectors)

l The E1 cables to the E1 panel (DB44-DB37)

l The E1 transit cables (MDR68-DB44)

The E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment need to be made on site byterminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors. The description of the E1 cables (with RJ-45connectors) to the external equipment is not provided in this topic.

5.6.1 DB44 E1 CableWhen the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the externalequipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the externalequipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by thesite.

5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 CableWhen an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect theSL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that isnear the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1panel.

5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 CableAn MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses anMDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the otherend to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 220: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

5.6.1 DB44 E1 CableWhen the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the externalequipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the externalequipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by thesite.

The DB44 E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment are categorized into 75-ohmcoaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables, and one E1 cable transmits eight E1 signals.The 75-ohm coaxial cables are further categorized into 2x8 core cables and 1x16 core cables.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (E1: 1 to 4) Label 2: W2 (E1: 5 to 8)

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 221: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)

L

Main label

A

W

APos.44 1

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (TX1 to TX8) Label 2: W2 (RX1 to RX8)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

Page 222: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-3 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable)

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 1 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 3 R6

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 5 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 7 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 2 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 4 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip

13 Ring 6 T3 9 Ring 6 T7

28 Tip 24 Tip

12 Ring 8 T4 8 Ring 8 T8

27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)

Pin Cable W Remarks

Pin Cable W Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 9 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 11 R6

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 223: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin Cable W Remarks

Pin Cable W Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 13 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 15 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 10 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 12 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip

13 Ring 6 T3 9 Ring 14 T7

28 Tip 24 Tip

12 Ring 8 T4 8 Ring 16 T8

27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-5 120-ohm E1 cable connections

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Color Relation

Color Relation

15 Blue Pair T1 38 Blue Pair R1

30 White 23 White

14 Orange Pair T2 37 Orange Pair R2

29 White 22 White

13 Green Pair T3 36 Green Pair R3

28 White 21 White

12 Brown Pair T4 35 Brown Pair R4

27 White 20 White

11 Grey Pair T5 34 Grey Pair R5

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

Page 224: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Color Relation

Color Relation

26 White 19 White

10 Blue Pair T6 33 Blue Pair R6

25 Red 18 Red

9 Orange Pair T7 32 Orange Pair R7

24 Red 17 Red

8 Green Pair T8 31 Green Pair R8

7 Red 16 Red

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 CableWhen an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect theSL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that isnear the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable

1500 mm

A

APos.1

Pos.44

1B

Pos.1

Pos.37

B

2

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 225: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-6 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks

X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5

X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17

X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6

X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15

X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7

X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13

X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8

X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11

X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5

X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16

X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6

X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14

X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7

X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12

X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8

X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 CableAn MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses anMDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the otherend to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.

An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 port or a 120-ohm E1 port.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

Page 226: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable

Pos.1

Pos.68

Pos.44

Pos.1

Label2

Label1

A

B

X3

X2

X1

Main Label

400 mm

W1

W2

1. Cable connector, type-MDR, 68 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 femaleLabel 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-7 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.35 X2.38 R1 X1.2 X2.34 R5

X1.36 X2.23 X1.1 X2.19

X1.37 X2.15 T1 X1.4 X2.11 T5

X1.38 X2.30 X1.3 X2.26

X1.39 X2.37 R2 X1.6 X2.33 R6

X1.40 X2.22 X1.5 X2.18

X1.41 X2.14 T2 X1.8 X2.10 T6

X1.42 X2.29 X1.7 X2.25

X1.43 X2.36 R3 X1.10 X2.32 R7

X1.44 X2.21 X1.9 X2.17

X1.45 X2.13 T3 X1.12 X2.9 T7

X1.46 X2.28 X1.11 X2.24

X1.47 X2.35 R4 X1.14 X2.31 R8

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 227: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.48 X2.20 X1.13 X2.16

X1.49 X2.12 T4 X1.16 X2.8 T8

X1.50 X2.27 X1.15 X2.7

W2 X1.19 X3.38 R9 X1.54 X3.34 R13

X1.20 X3.23 X1.53 X3.19

X1.21 X3.15 T9 X1.56 X3.11 T13

X1.22 X3.30 X1.55 X3.26

X1.23 X3.37 R10 X1.58 X3.33 R14

X1.24 X3.22 X1.57 X3.18

X1.25 X3.14 T10 X1.60 X3.10 T14

X1.26 X3.29 X1.59 X3.25

X1.27 X3.36 R11 X1.62 X3.32 R15

X1.28 X3.21 X1.61 X3.17

X1.29 X3.13 T11 X1.64 X3.9 T15

X1.30 X3.28 X1.63 X3.24

X1.31 X3.35 R12 X1.66 X3.31 R16

X1.32 X3.20 X1.65 X3.16

X1.33 X3.12 T12 X1.68 X3.8 T16

X1.34 X3.27 X1.67 X3.7

W1/W2 Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1eCable

External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

Page 228: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable

L

Main Label1

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMB, female

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface CableAuxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to theALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 229: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable

A

B

500mm300mm

Main label

Label 1X2

Label 2 Label 3

1000mm

X3View C

C

X1

View A2

Pos.1

Pos.26

X4Pos.37

Pos.1

3

Pos.1

Pos.9

1View B

Label 5Label 6

Label 7Label 8

W1

W2

W3

W4

Label 4

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 female 2. Cable connector, type-D, 26 male 3. Cable connector, type-D, 37female

Label 1: "OAM" Label 2: "S1" Label 3: "ALM"Label 4: "F1" Label 5: "F1-RX-TIP" Label 6: "F1-RX-RING"Label 7: "F1-TX-TIP" Label 8: "F1-TX-RING"

NOTE

In the preceding figure, "X3" indicates the asynchronous data interface, and "X2" indicates the reservedinterface.

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-8 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)

Connector X1 Connector X3 Wire color Relation Remarks

X1.8 X3.2 white - R

X1.16 X3.3 white Pair T

X1.25 X3.5 blue GND

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

Page 230: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX4

Wire color Relation Remarks

X1.24 X4.1 white Pair Out 2B 1st channel(the 2nd-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.6 X4.2 blue Out 2A

X1.21 X4.3 white Pair Out 1B 2nd channel(the 1st-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.3 X4.4 orange Out 1A

X1.23 X4.5 white Pair IN-6-GND 3rd channel(the 6th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.14 X4.6 green IN-6

X1.5 X4.7 white Pair IN-5-GND 4th channel(the 5th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.22 X4.8 brown IN-5

X1.13 X4.9 white Pair IN-4-GND 5th channel(the 4th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.4 X4.10 gray IN-4

X1.20 X4.11 red Pair IN-3-GND 6th channel(the 3rd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.11 X4.12 blue IN-3

X1.2 X4.13 red Pair IN-2-GND 7th channel(the 2nd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.19 X4.14 orange IN-2

X1.10 X4.15 red Pair IN-1-GND 8th channel(the 1st-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.1 X4.16 green IN-1

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 231: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)

Connector X1 Label on Cable W3 Wirecolor

Relation

Remarks

X1.7 F1-RX-TIP white Pair Synchronous datainterface receivingdata (+)

X1.12 F1-RX-RING blue Synchronous datainterface receivingdata (-)

X1.15 F1-TX-TIP white Pair Synchronous datainterfacetransmitting data (+)

X1.17 F1-TX-RING orange Synchronous datainterfacetransmitting data (-)

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable

1

Pos.37

Pos.1

A

A

Main label

L

1. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

Page 232: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Connection TableNOTE

The cable has five types of signal wires of different colors inside. There are eight blue wires, six grey wires,six pink wires, six green wires, and six orange wires. The signal cables of the same color are differentiatedby the red (RED) and black (BLK) dots on the cables. The cable with red dots is the signal cable. The cablewith black dots is defined as the ground. One "x" indicates that there is one dot at regular intervals. Forexample, a blue/redxxx cable refers to a blue signal cable on which there are three dots at regular intervals.

Table 5-11 External alarm transit cable connections

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

1 Pink/Redx

Pair First channel (the 2nd-channel output alarminterface)

17 Green/Redxx

Pair 6thchannel

2 Pink/Blackx

18 Green/Blackxx

3 Orange/Redx

Pair Second channel (the 1st-channel output alarminterface)

19 Grey/Redxx

Pair 13thchannel

4 Orange/Blackx

20 Grey/Blackxx

5 Blue/Redx

Pair 8th channel (the 6th-channel input alarminterface)

21 Pink/Redxxx

Pair 14thchannel

6 Blue/Blackx

22 Pink/Blackxxx

7 Green/Redx

Pair 9th channel (the 5th-channel input alarminterface )

23 Orange/Redxxx

Pair 12thchannel

8 Green/Blackx

24 Orange/Blackxxx

9 Grey/Redx

Pair 3rd channel (the 4th-channel input alarminterface)

25 Blue/Redxxx

Pair 5thchannel

10 Grey/Blackx

26 Blue/Blackxxx

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 233: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

11 Pink/Redxx

Pair 10th channel (the 3rd-channel input alarminterface

27 Green/Redxxx

Pair 11thchannel

12 Pink/Blackxx

28 Green/Blackxxx

13 Orange/Redxx

Pair 4th channel (the 2nd-channel input alarminterface

29 Grey/Redxxx

Pair 15thchannel

14 Orange/Blackxx

30 Grey/Blackxxx

15 Blue/Redxx

Pair 7th channel (the 1st-channel input alarminterface)

31 Blue/Redxxxx

Pair 16thchannel

16 Blue/Blackxx

32 Blue/Blackxxxx

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

Page 234: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable

Pos.9

Pos.1

1 Main lable

L

X1 X2

A

A

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 male

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-12 Serial port cable connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relation

X1.3 X2.2 Pair

X1.2 X2.3

X1.5 X2.5 -

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connectsthe interface of the orderwire phone set.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire

1

6

1

6

1 Main Label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire wire, RJ-11 connector

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 235: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-13 Orderwire wire connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Core

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

RJ-45 connectors have two types of interfaces. The first type is the medium dependent interface(MDI) used by terminal equipment such as network card. Refer to Table 5-14. The second typeis the MDI-X used by network equipment. Refer to Table 5-15.

Table 5-14 Pin assignments of the MDI

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

Page 236: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI-X

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables areused between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between thetwo network cables are the connections.

The ETH and ETH-HUB ports on the SCC board, the four FE ports on the EFT4 board and theGE/FE electrical ports on the EMS6 board support MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing. Thus, bothstraight through cables and crossover cables can be used between these ports and the MDI/MDI-X interfaces.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main Label

1. Network interface connector, RJ-45

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

5-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 237: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-16 Cable connection of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-17 Cable connection of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

Page 238: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 239: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

A Indicators, Weight and PowerConsumption of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

Page 240: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Table A-2 IFX indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 241: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

Page 242: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 243: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no power access.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms, or hasno power access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

Page 244: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-5 SL4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 245: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-7

Page 246: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-8 PL3 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 247: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

Page 248: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Green indicator (LINK1) On The link at the GE1 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE1 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing The GE1 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE1 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 249: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK2) On The link at the GE2 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE2 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2) On or flashing The GE2 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE2 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

Page 250: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-13 PXC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost, orswitching occurs to the clocksource.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 251: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Table A-14 SCC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the memory self-checkfails or loading upper layersoftware fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

Page 252: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The software is runningnormally.

ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.

Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Table A-15 FAN indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table A-16 Weight of Boards

Board Weight Power Consumption

IF1A 420 g < 12.2 W

IF1B 400 g < 12.2 W

IFX 450 g < 14.5 W

IF0A 520 g < 13.7 W

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

A-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 253: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Board Weight Power Consumption

IF0B 520 g < 13.7 W

IFH2 580 g < 16.4 W

SL4 290 g < 7.2 W

SL1 290 g < 3 W

SD1 300 g < 3.9 W

SLE 300 g < 4.2 W

SDE 330 g < 4.9 W

PL3 310 g < 5.1 W

PO1 280 g < 2 W

PH1 310 g < 2.8 W

PD1 380 g < 5.8 W

EFT4 306 g < 7.5 W

EMS6 400 g < 12.3 W

EFP6 400 g < 11.6 W

PXC 540 g < 7.5 W

SCC 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)

< 7.0 W

FAN 350 g < 9.7W

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-15

Page 254: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)
Page 255: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

B Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

Number

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and oneprotection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end ofa radio link.

A

Adaptivemodulation

A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation modebased on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, theequipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve thetransmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. Whenthe channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiencymodulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the linkthat carries high-priority services.

Add/Dropmultiplexer

A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signalto/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.

Adjacentchannelalternatepolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (ahorizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmittwo signals.

Automatictransmit powercontrol

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmitsignal detected at the receiver.

C

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

Page 256: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Co-channeldualpolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarizationwave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the singlepolarization.

Crosspolarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarizationwaves in the CCDP.

D

DC-C A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinetand also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet andthe electric equipment.

DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinetand is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the powersupply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Digitalmodulation

A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, andfrequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.

Dual-polarizedantenna

An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independentradio waves orthogonally polarized.

E

Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization cancompensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequencyselective fading.

Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degradedbecause some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,decided, and regenerated.

Ethernetprivate lineservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic informationover dedicated bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH,PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernetvirtual privateline service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic informationover shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH,PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernetprivate lanservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic informationover a dedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided bySDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 257: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Ethernetvirtual privatelan service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic informationover a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH,PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

F

Forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information tothe payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, thebit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Frequencydiversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies witha certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signaland selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impactof fading.

G

Gatewaynetworkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NEapplication layer and the NM application layer.

H

Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybridradio supports the AM function.

I

Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implementsaccessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Internet GroupManagementProtocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicastgroups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacentmulticast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Intermediatefrequency

The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signaland an RF signal.

IGMPsnooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. Thisprotocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to andanalyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet betweenhosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast dataon layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

L

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

Page 258: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernetswitch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this dataforwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is locatedon the NE management layer of the transport network.

Linkaggregationgroup

An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together toform a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the linkaggregation group as if it were a single link.

Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from theinput of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring theintegrality of the transferred signals.

M

Multiplexsectionprotection

The function performed to provide capability for switching a signalbetween and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

N

N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels andone protection channel.

Networkelement

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the softwarerunning on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control boardwhich manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE softwareruns on the system control Unit.

Networkmanagementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation,administration, and maintenance of a network.

Non-gatewaynetworkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layermust be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

O

Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operationengineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implementsfrequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

P

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 259: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

PlesiochronousDigitalHierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexesthe minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565Mbit/s rates.

Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vectoris fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of theelectromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, thiselectromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electricfield vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip ofthe electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Q

QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. Itencapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags totravel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

R

RapidSpanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanningtree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backwardcompatible with the STP protocol.

S

Singlepolarizedantenna

An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagneticwaves.

Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by aspecific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,only receive SD is used.

Spanning TreeProtocol

An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topologyof a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.

Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.

Subnetworkconnectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replacedby a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetworkconnection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.

SynchronousDigitalHierarchy

A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, andcross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitablyadapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

Page 260: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

U

U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It cansupport all the NE level and network level management functions, and canmanage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in aunified manner.

V

Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several networksegments or networks by using the network management software basedon the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtualLAN.

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

B-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 261: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

A

AM Adaptive Modulation

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AU Administrative Unit

B

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

CIR committed information rate

CLNP connectionless network protocol

CLNS Connectionless Network Service

CoS Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

Page 262: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CVLAN Customer VLAN

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCP differentiated services code point

DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EoPDH Ethernet Over PDH

EoS Ethernet Over SDH

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FIFO First In First Out

FLP Fast Link Pulse

FTP file transfer protocol

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 263: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping

GUI Graphical User Interface

H

HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure

HSB Hot Standby

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU Indoor Unit

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF Intermediate Frequency

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO International Standard Organization

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

M

MAC Medium Access Control

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-3

Page 264: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MDI Medium Dependent Interface

MIB Management Information Base

MPLS multiprotocol label switching

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N

NE Network Element

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O

ODU Outdoor Unit

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

Q

QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RF radio frequency

RFC Request For Comment

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

C-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Page 265: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RMON Remote Monitoring

RSL Received Signal Level

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD Space Diversity

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNC SubNetwork Connection

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio

STM Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4

STM-N SDH Transport Module -N

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

T

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TU Tributary Unit

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UNI user-network interface

V

OptiX RTN 620IDU Hardware Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-5

Page 266: IDU 620 Hardware Description(V100R005C00_02)

VC Virtual Container

VC12 Virtual Container -12

VC-12 Virtual Container -12

VC3 Virtual Container -3

VC-3 Virtual Container -3

VC4 Virtual Container -4

VC-4 Virtual Container -4

VCG Virtual Concatenation Group

VLAN Virtual LAN

VoIP Voice over IP

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WAN Wide Area Network

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC Cross-polarization interference cancellation

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX RTN 620

IDU Hardware Description

C-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)